blob: b2b5419467cc123b4a2b70c2d926b4576651248d [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020024#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020025#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070026
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040027/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070040 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010043 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070047 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070048 */
49
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050/**
51 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040053 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040060 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070072 */
73
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020074/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040075 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010089/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500122struct device;
123
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400124/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200133};
134
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200137/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200294 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200301 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300302 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
303 * keep alive) changed.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100304 */
305enum ieee80211_bss_change {
306 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
308 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300309 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
314 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
315 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300318 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300323 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200324 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300326 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100327 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100328 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200329 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300330 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200331
332 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100333};
334
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300335/*
336 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
337 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
338 * filtering will be disabled.
339 */
340#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
341
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100342/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200343 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
344 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200345 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300346 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300347 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
348 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
349 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700350 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200351enum ieee80211_event_type {
352 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200353 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300354 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300355 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200356};
357
358/**
359 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
360 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
361 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
362 */
363enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700364 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
365 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
366};
367
368/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200369 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200370 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
371 */
372struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
373 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
374};
375
376/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200377 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
378 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200379 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200380 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
381 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200382 */
383enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
384 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200385 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200386 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
387 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200388};
389
390/**
391 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
392 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
393 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
394 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
395 */
396enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
397 MLME_SUCCESS,
398 MLME_DENIED,
399 MLME_TIMEOUT,
400};
401
402/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200403 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200404 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
405 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
406 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
407 */
408struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
409 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
411 u16 reason;
412};
413
414/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300415 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
416 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
417 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300418 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300419 */
420struct ieee80211_ba_event {
421 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
422 u16 tid;
423 u16 ssn;
424};
425
426/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200427 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200428 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200429 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200430 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300431 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300432 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200433 */
434struct ieee80211_event {
435 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
436 union {
437 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200438 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300439 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200440 } u;
441};
442
443/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200444 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
445 *
446 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
447 *
448 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
449 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
450 */
451struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
452 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
453 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
454};
455
456/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100457 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
458 *
459 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
460 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
461 *
462 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200463 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
464 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530465 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100466 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
467 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200468 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
469 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100470 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200471 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300472 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200473 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100474 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
475 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
476 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
477 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200478 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200479 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
480 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200481 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100482 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
483 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200484 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
485 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
486 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700487 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800488 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200489 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
490 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
491 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300492 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100493 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200494 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
495 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100496 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
497 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200498 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100499 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300500 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
501 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
502 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200503 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200504 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
505 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
506 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100507 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
508 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
509 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
510 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200511 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300512 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
513 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
514 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
515 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100516 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
517 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
518 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200519 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200520 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
521 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
522 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300523 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
524 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200525 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300526 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
527 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200528 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100529 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
530 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
531 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
532 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
533 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
534 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100535 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200536 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
537 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
538 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300539 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
540 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
541 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
542 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
543 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
544 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
545 * station.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100546 */
547struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200548 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100549 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200550 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530551 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100552 u16 aid;
553 /* erp related data */
554 bool use_cts_prot;
555 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300556 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200557 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800558 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700559 u16 beacon_int;
560 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200561 u64 sync_tsf;
562 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100563 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100564 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300565 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200566 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200567 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200568 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
569 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100570 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
571 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100572 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200573 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300574 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100575 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200576 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200577 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300578 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300579 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
580 size_t ssid_len;
581 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200582 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100583 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100584 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200585 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300586 u16 max_idle_period;
587 bool protected_keep_alive;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100588};
589
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800590/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200591 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800592 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700593 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800594 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
597 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
598 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
599 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
600 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
601 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
602 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
603 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
604 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
605 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
606 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200607 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200608 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
609 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200610 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
612 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200613 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200614 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200615 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
616 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
617 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
618 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
619 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
620 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
621 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
622 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200623 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
624 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
625 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300626 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
627 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200628 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
629 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
630 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600631 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
632 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
633 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100634 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
635 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
636 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200637 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
638 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200639 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
640 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100641 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
642 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
643 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200644 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
645 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
646 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
647 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100648 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
649 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
650 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100651 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
652 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
653 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200654 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
655 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
656 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400657 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200658 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
659 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100660 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
661 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
662 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
663 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200664 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
665 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
666 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530667 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
668 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
669 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200670 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
671 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
672 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200673 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
674 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530675 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
676 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
677 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200678 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
679 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
680 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530681 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
682 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
683 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
684 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
685 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200686 *
687 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
688 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800689 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200690enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200692 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
693 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
694 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
695 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
699 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
700 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
701 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
702 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600704 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100705 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200706 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200707 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100708 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200709 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100710 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100711 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200712 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400713 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200714 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100715 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200716 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530717 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200718 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530719 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200720 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530721 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200722};
723
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200724#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
725
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200726/**
727 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
728 *
729 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
730 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530731 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
732 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100733 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100734 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200735 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200736 *
737 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
738 */
739enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
740 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530741 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100742 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100743 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200744 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200745};
746
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200747/*
748 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
749 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
750 */
751#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
752 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
753 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
754 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
755 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100756 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200757 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200758 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200759
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530760/**
761 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
762 * Rate Control algorithm.
763 *
764 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
765 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
766 *
767 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
768 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
769 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
770 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100772 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
773 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530774 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
775 * Greenfield mode.
776 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100777 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
778 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
779 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530780 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
781 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
782 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
783 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
784 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200785enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
786 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
787 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
788 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
789
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100790 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200791 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
792 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
793 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
794 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
795 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100796 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
797 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
798 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800799};
800
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200801
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200802/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
803#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200804
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200805/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
806#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
807
808/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200809#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200810
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200811/* maximum number of rate table entries */
812#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
813
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200814/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200815 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200816 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200817 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
818 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200819 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200820 *
821 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
822 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
823 *
824 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
825 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200826 *
827 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
828 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
829 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
830 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300831 * information::
832 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200833 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300834 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200835 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
836 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
837 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
838 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300839 * information should then contain::
840 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200841 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300842 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200843 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
844 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200845 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200846struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
847 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100848 u16 count:5,
849 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000850} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200851
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100852#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
853
854static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
855 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
856{
857 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200858 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
859 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100860}
861
862static inline u8
863ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
864{
865 return rate->idx & 0xF;
866}
867
868static inline u8
869ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
870{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200871 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100872}
873
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200874/**
875 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200876 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200877 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
878 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
879 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
880 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
881 *
882 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200883 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200884 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100885 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700886 * @control: union for control data
887 * @status: union for status data
888 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100889 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700890 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100891 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700892 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200893 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200894 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200895struct ieee80211_tx_info {
896 /* common information */
897 u32 flags;
898 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200899
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200900 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100901
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100902 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100903
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200904 union {
905 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200906 union {
907 /* rate control */
908 struct {
909 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
910 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
911 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200912 u8 use_rts:1;
913 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200914 u8 short_preamble:1;
915 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200916 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200917 };
918 /* only needed before rate control */
919 unsigned long jiffies;
920 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200921 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +0200922 union {
923 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
924 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
925
926 /* When packets are enqueued on txq it's easy
927 * to re-construct the vif pointer. There's no
928 * more space in tx_info so it can be used to
929 * store the necessary enqueue time for packet
930 * sojourn time computation.
931 */
932 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
933 };
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200934 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200935 u32 flags;
936 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200937 } control;
938 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200939 u64 cookie;
940 } ack;
941 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200942 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200943 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200944 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100945 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200946 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300947 u16 tx_time;
948 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200949 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200950 struct {
951 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
952 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200953 u8 pad[4];
954
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200955 void *rate_driver_data[
956 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
957 };
958 void *driver_data[
959 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200960 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700961};
962
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300963/**
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +0200964 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
965 *
966 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
967 * @info: Basic tx status information
968 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
969 */
970struct ieee80211_tx_status {
971 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
972 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
973 struct sk_buff *skb;
974};
975
976/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200977 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
978 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200979 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
980 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
981 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200982 *
983 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
984 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
985 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
986 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
987 */
988struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200989 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
990 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200991 const u8 *common_ies;
992 size_t common_ie_len;
993};
994
995
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200996static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
997{
998 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
999}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001000
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001001static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1002{
1003 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1004}
1005
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001006/**
1007 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1008 *
1009 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1010 *
1011 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1012 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1013 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1014 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1015 *
1016 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1017 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1018 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1019 */
1020static inline void
1021ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1022{
1023 int i;
1024
1025 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1026 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1027 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1028 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1029 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1030 /* clear the rate counts */
1031 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1032 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1033
1034 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001035 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001036 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1037 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1038 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1039}
1040
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001041
1042/**
1043 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1044 *
1045 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1046 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1047 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1048 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001049 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1050 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001051 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001052 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1053 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001054 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1055 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1056 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1057 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001058 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1059 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001060 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1061 * the frame.
1062 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1063 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001064 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001065 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1066 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1067 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001068 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1069 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1070 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001071 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1072 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001073 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1074 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001075 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1076 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1077 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001078 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1079 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1080 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1081 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1082 * on this subframe
1083 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1084 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001085 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1086 * done by the hardware
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001087 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1088 * processing it in any regular way.
1089 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1090 * them for sniffing purposes.
1091 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1092 * monitor interfaces.
1093 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1094 * them for sniffing purposes.
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001095 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1096 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1097 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1098 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1099 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1100 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1101 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1102 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1103 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001104 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1105 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1106 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001107 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1108 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1109 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001110 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1111 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001112 */
1113enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001114 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1115 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001116 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001117 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1118 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1119 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1120 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001121 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001122 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1123 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1124 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1125 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1126 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1127 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1128 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1129 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1130 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1131 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1132 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1133 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1134 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1135 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1136 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1137 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001138};
1139
1140/**
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001141 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001142 *
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001143 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001144 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1145 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1146 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1147 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1148 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1149 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1150 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001151 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001152 */
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001153enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1154 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001155 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1156 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1157 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1158 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1159 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001160};
1161
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001162#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1163
1164enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1165 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1166 RX_ENC_HT,
1167 RX_ENC_VHT,
1168};
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001169
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001170/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001171 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1172 *
1173 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1174 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001175 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001176 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001177 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1178 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001179 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1180 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001181 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1182 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001183 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001184 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001185 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1186 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001187 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1188 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1189 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001190 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1191 * values were filled.
1192 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1193 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001194 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001195 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001196 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001197 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001198 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001199 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1200 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001201 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001202 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001203 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1204 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1205 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001206 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001207struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1208 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001209 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001210 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001211 u32 ampdu_reference;
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001212 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001213 u16 freq;
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001214 u8 enc_flags;
1215 u8 encoding:2, bw:3;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001216 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001217 u8 nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001218 u8 rx_flags;
1219 u8 band;
1220 u8 antenna;
1221 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001222 u8 chains;
1223 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001224 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001225};
1226
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001227/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001228 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1229 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1230 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1231 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1232 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1233 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1234 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1235 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1236 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1237 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1238 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1239 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1240 * @data field.
1241 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1242 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1243 * length
1244 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1245 *
1246 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1247 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1248 * data.
1249 */
1250struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1251 u32 present;
1252 u8 align;
1253 u8 oui[3];
1254 u8 subns;
1255 u8 pad;
1256 u16 len;
1257 u8 data[];
1258} __packed;
1259
1260/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001261 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1262 *
1263 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1264 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001265 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1266 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1267 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001268 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1269 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1270 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1271 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1272 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1273 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1274 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001275 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1276 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1277 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1278 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1279 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001280 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1281 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001282 */
1283enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001284 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001285 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001286 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001287 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001288};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001289
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001290
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001291/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001292 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1293 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001294 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001295 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001296 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001297 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001298 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001299 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001300 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001301 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001302 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1303 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001304 */
1305enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001306 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001307 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001308 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001309 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001310 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1311 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1312 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001313 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001314};
1315
1316/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001317 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1318 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001319 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1320 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1321 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1322 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1323 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001324 */
1325enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1326 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1327 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1328 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1329 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1330
1331 /* keep last */
1332 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1333};
1334
1335/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001336 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1337 *
1338 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1339 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001340 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1341 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001342 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001343 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1344 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1345 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001346 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1347 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1348 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1349 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001350 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1351 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001352 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001353 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001354 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001355 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001356 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001357 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1358 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001359 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001360 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1361 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001362 *
1363 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1364 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001365 * configured for an HT channel.
1366 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1367 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001368 */
1369struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001370 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001371 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001372
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001373 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001374 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001375
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001376 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1377
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001378 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001379 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001380 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001381};
1382
1383/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001384 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1385 *
1386 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1387 * operation.
1388 *
1389 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1390 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1391 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1392 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001393 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1394 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001395 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1396 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001397 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001398 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1399 */
1400struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1401 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001402 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001403 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001404 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001405 u8 count;
1406};
1407
1408/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001409 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1410 *
1411 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1412 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001413 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1414 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1415 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1416 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001417 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1418 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1419 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1420 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001421 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1422 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1423 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001424 */
1425enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1426 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001427 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001428 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001429 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001430};
1431
1432/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001433 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1434 *
1435 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1436 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1437 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001438 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001439 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1440 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001441 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001442 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1443 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001444 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1445 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1446 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001447 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001448 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1449 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1450 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1451 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001452 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1453 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001454 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1455 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1456 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1457 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1458 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001459 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001460 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001461 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001462 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1463 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001464 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001465 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001466 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001467 */
1468struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001469 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001470 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001471 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001472 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001473 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001474 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001475
1476 u8 cab_queue;
1477 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1478
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001479 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1480
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001481 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1482
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001483 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001484
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001485#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1486 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1487#endif
1488
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001489 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1490
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001491 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001492 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001493};
1494
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001495static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1496{
1497#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001498 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001499#endif
1500 return false;
1501}
1502
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001503/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001504 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1505 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1506 *
1507 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1508 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1509 *
1510 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1511 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1512 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1513 */
1514struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1515
1516/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001517 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1518 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1519 *
1520 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1521 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1522 *
1523 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1524 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1525 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1526 */
1527struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1528
1529/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001530 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1531 *
1532 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1533 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1534 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001535 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1536 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001537 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1538 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001539 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1540 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1541 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001542 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1543 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001544 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001545 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1546 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001547 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001548 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001549 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001550 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1551 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1552 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001553 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1554 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1555 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1556 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1557 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1558 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1559 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001560 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001561 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001562 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001563 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1564 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1565 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001566 */
1567enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001568 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1569 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1570 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1571 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1572 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1573 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1574 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001575 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001576};
1577
1578/**
1579 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1580 *
1581 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1582 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1583 *
1584 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1585 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001586 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001587 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001588 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1589 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001590 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1591 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1592 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001593 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1594 * data block:
1595 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1596 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1597 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001598 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1599 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001600 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001601struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001602 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001603 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001604 u8 icv_len;
1605 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001606 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001607 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001608 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001609 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001610 u8 key[0];
1611};
1612
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001613#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1614
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001615#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1616#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1617
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001618/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001619 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1620 *
1621 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1622 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1623 * reverse order than in packet)
1624 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1625 * reverse order than in packet)
1626 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1627 * reverse order than in packet)
1628 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1629 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001630 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001631 */
1632struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1633 union {
1634 struct {
1635 u32 iv32;
1636 u16 iv16;
1637 } tkip;
1638 struct {
1639 u8 pn[6];
1640 } ccmp;
1641 struct {
1642 u8 pn[6];
1643 } aes_cmac;
1644 struct {
1645 u8 pn[6];
1646 } aes_gmac;
1647 struct {
1648 u8 pn[6];
1649 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001650 struct {
1651 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1652 u8 seq_len;
1653 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001654 };
1655};
1656
1657/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001658 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1659 *
1660 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1661 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1662 *
1663 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1664 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1665 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1666 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1667 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1668 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1669 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1670 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1671 * key_idx value calculation:
1672 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1673 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1674 */
1675struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1676 u32 cipher;
1677 u16 iftype;
1678 u8 hdr_len;
1679 u8 pn_len;
1680 u8 pn_off;
1681 u8 key_idx_off;
1682 u8 key_idx_mask;
1683 u8 key_idx_shift;
1684 u8 mic_len;
1685};
1686
1687/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001688 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1689 *
1690 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1691 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1692 *
1693 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1694 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1695 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001696enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001697 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001698};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001699
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001700/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001701 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1702 *
1703 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1704 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1705 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1706 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1707 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1708 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1709 */
1710enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1711 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1712 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1713 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1714 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1715 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1716 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1717};
1718
1719/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001720 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1721 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1722 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1723 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1724 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1725 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1726 *
1727 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1728 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1729 */
1730enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1731 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1732 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1733 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1734 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1735};
1736
1737/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001738 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1739 *
1740 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001741 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001742 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1743 */
1744struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1745 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1746 struct {
1747 s8 idx;
1748 u8 count;
1749 u8 count_cts;
1750 u8 count_rts;
1751 u16 flags;
1752 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1753};
1754
1755/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001756 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1757 *
1758 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1759 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1760 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1761 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1762 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001763 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001764 *
1765 * @addr: MAC address
1766 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001767 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001768 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1769 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001770 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1771 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1772 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001773 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1774 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001775 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001776 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001777 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001778 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1779 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001780 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001781 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001782 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1783 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1784 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1785 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001786 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001787 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001788 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001789 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1790 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301791 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001792 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1793 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1794 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001795 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001796 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001797 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001798 */
1799struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001800 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001801 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1802 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001803 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001804 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001805 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001806 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001807 u8 uapsd_queues;
1808 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001809 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001810 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001811 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001812 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001813 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001814 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301815 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001816 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001817
1818 /**
1819 * @max_amsdu_len:
1820 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1821 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1822 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1823 *
1824 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1825 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1826 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1827 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1828 *
1829 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1830 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1831 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1832 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001833 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001834 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001835 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001836
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001837 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1838
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001839 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001840 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001841};
1842
1843/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001844 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1845 *
1846 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301847 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001848 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001849 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1850 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1851 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001852enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001853 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1854};
1855
1856/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001857 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1858 *
1859 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1860 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1861 */
1862struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1863 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1864};
1865
1866/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001867 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1868 *
1869 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1870 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1871 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1872 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001873 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001874 *
1875 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1876 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1877 */
1878struct ieee80211_txq {
1879 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1880 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1881 u8 tid;
1882 u8 ac;
1883
1884 /* must be last */
1885 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1886};
1887
1888/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001889 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1890 *
1891 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1892 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1893 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1894 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1895 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1896 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001897 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1898 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1899 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1900 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1901 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1902 * algorithm.
1903 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1904 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1905 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1906 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1907 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1908 * CCK frames.
1909 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001910 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1911 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1912 * the FCS at the end.
1913 *
1914 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1915 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1916 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1917 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1918 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1919 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001920 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001921 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001922 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1923 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1924 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1925 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1926 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001927 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1928 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1929 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1930 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1931 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001932 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1933 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1934 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301935 *
1936 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1937 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001938 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001939 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1940 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1941 *
1942 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1943 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1944 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1945 *
1946 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1947 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001948 *
1949 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1950 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001951 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301952 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1953 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1954 * the stack.
1955 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001956 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001957 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1958 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001959 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001960 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1961 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1962 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001963 *
1964 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1965 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1966 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1967 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1968 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1969 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001970 *
1971 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1972 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1973 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1974 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1975 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1976 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001977 *
1978 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1979 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1980 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001981 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001982 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1983 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1984 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001985 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001986 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1987 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1988 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1989 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001990 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1991 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1992 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1993 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1994 * supported cipher suites.
1995 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001996 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1997 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1998 * for frames.
1999 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002000 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2001 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2002 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2003 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002004 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02002005 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2006 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2007 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002008 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2009 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2010 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01002011 *
2012 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2013 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002014 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02002015 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2016 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2017 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2018 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002019 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2020 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2021 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2022 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002023 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002024 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2025 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2026 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002027 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002028 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002029 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002030 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2031 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2032 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002033 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2034 * within A-MPDU.
2035 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002036 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2037 * for sent beacons.
2038 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002039 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2040 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2041 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2042 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2043 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002044 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2045 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2046 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2047 * timeout.
2048 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002049 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2050 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2051 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002052 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2053 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2054 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2055 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2056 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2057 *
2058 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2059 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2060 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302061 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2062 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2063 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2064 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2065 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002066 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2067 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2068 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2069 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002070 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002071 */
2072enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002073 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2074 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2075 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2076 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2077 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2078 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2079 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2080 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2081 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2082 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2083 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2084 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2085 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2086 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2087 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2088 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2089 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2090 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2091 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2092 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2093 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2094 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2095 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2096 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2097 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2098 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2099 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2100 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2101 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002102 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002103 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002104 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002105 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002106 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002107 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002108 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2109 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302110 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002111 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002112
2113 /* keep last, obviously */
2114 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002115};
2116
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002117/**
2118 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002119 *
2120 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2121 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2122 *
2123 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2124 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2125 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002126 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2127 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002128 *
2129 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2130 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002131 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2132 * along with this structure.
2133 *
2134 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2135 *
2136 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2137 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2138 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002139 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2140 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002141 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002142 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002143 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002144 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002145 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002146 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002147 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002148 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002149 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2150 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2151 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002152 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2153 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2154 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002155 *
2156 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2157 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002158 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2159 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002160 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2161 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002162 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2163 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002164 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002165 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2166 * can handle.
2167 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2168 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002169 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002170 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002171 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2172 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2173 * aggregation.
2174 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2175 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2176 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002177 *
2178 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002179 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2180 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2181 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2182 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002183 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002184 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2185 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2186 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002187 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2188 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002189 *
2190 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2191 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002192 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002193 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002194 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002195 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2196 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002197 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002198 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002199 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2200 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2201 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2202 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2203 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2204 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2205 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2206 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002207 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002208 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2209 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002210 *
2211 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2212 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2213 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2214 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2215 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2216 * neither enabled.
2217 *
2218 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2219 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2220 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002221 *
2222 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2223 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2224 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002225 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2226 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002227 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002228struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002229 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002230 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002231 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002232 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002233 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002234 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002235 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002236 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002237 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002238 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002239 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002240 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002241 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002242 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002243 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002244 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002245 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002246 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002247 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002248 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002249 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002250 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002251 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002252 struct {
2253 int units_pos;
2254 s16 accuracy;
2255 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002256 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002257 u8 uapsd_queues;
2258 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002259 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2260 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002261 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002262};
2263
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002264static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2265 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2266{
2267 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2268}
2269#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2270
2271static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2272 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2273{
2274 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2275}
2276#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2277
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002278/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002279 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2280 *
2281 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2282 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2283 */
2284struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2285 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2286
2287 /* Keep last */
2288 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2289};
2290
2291/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002292 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2293 *
2294 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2295 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2296 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2297 * @status: channel-switch response status
2298 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2299 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2300 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2301 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2302 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2303 */
2304struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2305 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2306 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2307 u8 action_code;
2308 u32 status;
2309 u32 timestamp;
2310 u16 switch_time;
2311 u16 switch_timeout;
2312 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2313 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2314};
2315
2316/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002317 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2318 *
2319 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2320 *
2321 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2322 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2323 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2324 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2325 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002326 *
2327 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002328 */
2329struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2330
2331/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002332 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2333 *
2334 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2335 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2336 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002337static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2338{
2339 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2340}
2341
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002342/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002343 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002344 *
2345 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2346 * @addr: the address to set
2347 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002348static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002349{
2350 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2351}
2352
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002353static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2354ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002355 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002356{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002357 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002358 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002359 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002360}
2361
2362static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2363ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002364 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002365{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002366 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002367 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002368 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002369}
2370
2371static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2372ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002373 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002374{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002375 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002376 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002377 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002378}
2379
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002380/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002381 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2382 * @hw: the hardware
2383 * @skb: the skb
2384 *
2385 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2386 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2387 */
2388void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2389
2390/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002391 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002392 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002393 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2394 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2395 *
2396 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2397 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002398 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2399 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2400 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002401 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2402 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2403 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002404 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2405 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2406 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2407 *
2408 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2409 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2410 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2411 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2412 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002413 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2414 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2415 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2416 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2417 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002418 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2419 *
2420 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2421 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2422 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2423 * based on the receive flags.
2424 *
2425 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2426 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2427 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2428 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002429 *
2430 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2431 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2432 * handler.
2433 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002434 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002435 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2436 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002437 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002438 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002439 *
2440 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2441 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2442 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002443 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002444
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002445/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002446 * DOC: Powersave support
2447 *
2448 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2449 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002450 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2451 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2452 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2453 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2454 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2455 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2456 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2457 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002458 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002459 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2460 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2461 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002462 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2463 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002464 *
2465 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2466 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2467 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002468 *
2469 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2470 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2471 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2472 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002473 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2474 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002475 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002476 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002477 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2478 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2479 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2480 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2481 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2482 * periods.
2483 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002484 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002485 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2486 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2487 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2488 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2489 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2490 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2491 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2492 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2493 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2494 *
2495 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002496 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002497 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002498 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2499 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2500 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2501 *
2502 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2503 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002504 */
2505
2506/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002507 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2508 *
2509 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002510 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002511 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2512 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2513 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2514 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2515 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2516 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002517 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2518 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002519 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2520 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2521 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2522 *
2523 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2524 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2525 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2526 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2527 *
2528 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2529 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2530 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2531 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002532 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002533 * - a list of information element IDs
2534 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2535 *
2536 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2537 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2538 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2539 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2540 * vendor information elements.
2541 *
2542 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2543 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2544 *
2545 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2546 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2547 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2548 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2549 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2550 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2551 *
2552 *
2553 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2554 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2555 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2556 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2557 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2558 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2559 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2560 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2561 *
2562 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2563 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2564 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002565 */
2566
2567/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002568 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2569 *
2570 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2571 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2572 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2573 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2574 *
2575 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2576 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2577 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2578 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2579 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2580 * hardware flags.
2581 *
2582 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2583 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2584 * turned off otherwise.
2585 *
2586 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2587 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2588 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2589 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2590 */
2591
2592/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002593 * DOC: Frame filtering
2594 *
2595 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2596 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2597 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2598 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2599 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2600 *
2601 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2602 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2603 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2604 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002605 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2606 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2607 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2608 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2609 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2610 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2611 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002612 *
2613 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2614 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2615 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2616 * or dropped.
2617 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002618 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2619 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2620 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2621 * the flag, but not clear it.
2622 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2623 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2624 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2625 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2626 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2627 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2628 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2629 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002630 */
2631
2632/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002633 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2634 *
2635 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2636 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2637 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2638 *
2639 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2640 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2641 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2642 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2643 * the driver code.
2644 *
2645 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2646 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2647 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2648 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2649 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2650 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2651 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2652 *
2653 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2654 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2655 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2656 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2657 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2658 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2659 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2660 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2661 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2662 * @sta_notify callback.
2663 *
2664 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2665 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2666 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2667 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2668 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2669 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2670 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002671 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002672 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2673 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2674 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2675 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2676 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2677 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2678 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002679 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2680 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2681 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002682 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2683 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2684 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2685 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2686 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2687 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2688 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2689 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2690 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2691 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2692 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2693 *
2694 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2695 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2696 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2697 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2698 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2699 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2700 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2701 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2702 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2703 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002704 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002705 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2706 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2707 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2708 *
2709 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2710 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2711 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2712 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2713 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002714 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002715 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2716 *
2717 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2718 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2719 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2720 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002721 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002722 *
2723 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2724 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2725 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2726 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002727 */
2728
2729/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002730 * DOC: HW queue control
2731 *
2732 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2733 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2734 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2735 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2736 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2737 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2738 *
2739 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2740 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2741 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2742 *
2743 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2744 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2745 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2746 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2747 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2748 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2749 * the hardware queue.
2750 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2751 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2752 *
2753 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2754 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2755 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2756 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2757 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2758 *
2759 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2760 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2761 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2762 * off-channel queue: 9
2763 *
2764 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2765 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2766 *
2767 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2768 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2769 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2770 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2771 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2772 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2773 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2774 *
2775 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2776 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2777 *
2778 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2779 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2780 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2781 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2782 */
2783
2784/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002785 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2786 *
2787 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2788 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2789 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2790 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2791 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002792 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2793 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2794 * multicast address.
2795 *
2796 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2797 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2798 *
2799 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2800 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2801 *
2802 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2803 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2804 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2805 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2806 * honour this flag if possible.
2807 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002808 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2809 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002810 *
2811 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002812 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002813 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002814 *
2815 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002816 */
2817enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002818 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2819 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2820 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2821 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2822 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2823 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002824 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002825 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002826};
2827
2828/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002829 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2830 *
2831 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2832 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002833 *
2834 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2835 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002836 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002837 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2838 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002839 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2840 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2841 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002842 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002843 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2844 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2845 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2846 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2847 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2848 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2849 * session is gone and removes the station.
2850 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2851 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2852 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2853 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002854 */
2855enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2856 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2857 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002858 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002859 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2860 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2861 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002862 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002863};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002864
2865/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002866 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2867 *
2868 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2869 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2870 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2871 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2872 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2873 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2874 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2875 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2876 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2877 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2878 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2879 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2880 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2881 */
2882struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2883 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2884 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2885 u16 tid;
2886 u16 ssn;
2887 u8 buf_size;
2888 bool amsdu;
2889 u16 timeout;
2890};
2891
2892/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002893 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2894 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002895 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2896 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002897 */
2898enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2899 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002900 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002901};
2902
2903/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002904 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2905 *
2906 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002907 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2908 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2909 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002910 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002911 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2912 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2913 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002914 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2915 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002916 */
2917enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2918 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2919 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002920 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002921 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002922};
2923
2924/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002925 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2926 *
2927 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2928 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2929 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2930 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2931 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2932 *
2933 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2934 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2935 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2936 */
2937enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2938 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2939 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2940};
2941
2942/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002943 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2944 *
2945 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2946 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2947 *
2948 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2949 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2950 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2951 * of wowlan configuration)
2952 */
2953enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2954 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2955 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2956};
2957
2958/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002959 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2960 *
2961 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2962 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2963 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2964 *
2965 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2966 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2967 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002968 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002969 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002970 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002971 *
2972 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2973 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2974 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2975 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2976 * or zero.
2977 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2978 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2979 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002980 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002981 *
2982 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2983 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2984 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2985 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002986 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2987 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002988 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002989 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002990 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2991 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2992 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2993 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2994 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002995 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2996 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2997 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2998 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002999 *
3000 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3001 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3002 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3003 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3004 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3005 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003006 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3007 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3008 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3009 * in suspend().
3010 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003011 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04003012 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003013 * and @stop must be implemented.
3014 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3015 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3016 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3017 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3018 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003019 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003020 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003021 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3022 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3023 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3024 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3025 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3026 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003027 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3028 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3029 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3030 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3031 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3032 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3033 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003034 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003035 *
3036 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3037 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003038 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003039 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003040 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003041 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3042 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3043 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3044 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3045 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003046 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3047 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003048 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003049 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3050 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3051 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003053 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3054 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003055 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003056 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003057 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3058 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3059 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3060 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3061 * which flags are changed.
3062 * This callback can sleep.
3063 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003064 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003065 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003066 *
3067 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003068 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3069 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003070 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003071 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003072 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003073 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003074 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3075 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3076 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003077 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003078 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003079 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3080 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3081 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3082 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3083 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3084 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003085 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3086 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3087 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3088 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003089 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003090 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003091 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3092 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003093 * that power save is disabled.
3094 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3095 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3096 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3097 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3098 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3099 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3100 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003101 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003102 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003103 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3104 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3105 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3106 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3107 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3108 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3109 * The callback can sleep.
3110 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003111 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3112 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3113 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3114 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3115 *
3116 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003117 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003118 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003119 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3120 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003121 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3122 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3123 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003124 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003125 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3126 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3127 * this notification.
3128 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003129 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003130 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3131 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003132 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003133 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003134 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3135 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3136 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003137 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003138 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003139 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003140 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3141 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3142 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003143 * The callback can sleep.
3144 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003145 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003146 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003147 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003148 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3149 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3150 *
3151 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003152 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3153 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3154 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3155 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3156 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003157 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303158 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3159 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003160 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3161 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303162 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003163 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003164 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3165 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3166 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003167 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003168 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3169 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3170 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3171 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003172 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3173 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3174 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3175 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3176 * The callback can sleep.
3177 *
3178 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3179 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3180 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3181 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3182 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003183 * The callback can sleep.
3184 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003185 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3186 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3187 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3188 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3189 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3190 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3191 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003192 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3193 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3194 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003195 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003196 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3197 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3198 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3199 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3200 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3201 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3202 * The callback can sleep.
3203 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003204 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003205 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003206 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003207 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003208 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003209 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003210 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003211 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003212 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003213 *
3214 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003215 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003216 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003217 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003218 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003219 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3220 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3221 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3222 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3223 * The callback can sleep.
3224 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003225 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3226 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3227 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3228 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003229 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003230 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003231 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3232 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3233 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003234 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003235 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003236 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003237 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3238 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003239 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3240 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3241 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003242 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003243 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003244 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3245 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003246 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3247 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3248 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003249 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003250 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3251 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003252 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003253 *
3254 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003255 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3256 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3257 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3258 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003259 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003260 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003261 *
3262 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3263 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3264 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3265 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003266 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003267 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3268 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3269 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3270 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3271 *
3272 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003273 *
3274 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3275 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3276 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3277 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3278 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3279 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003280 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003281 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3282 * must be accepted in this case.
3283 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003284 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3285 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003286 *
3287 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3288 *
3289 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303290 *
3291 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3292 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303293 *
3294 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3295 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3296 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003297 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3298 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003299 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003300 *
3301 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3302 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3303 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3304 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003305 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003306 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3307 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3308 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3309 * more-data bit must always be set.
3310 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3311 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003312 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3313 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3314 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3315 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3316 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3317 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003318 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3319 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3320 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003321 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3322 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003323 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003324 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003325 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003326 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3327 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3328 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003329 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003330 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3331 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3332 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3333 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003334 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003335 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003336 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3337 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3338 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003339 *
3340 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3341 *
3342 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3343 *
3344 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3345 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3346 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003347 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3348 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3349 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3350 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3351 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3352 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3353 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3354 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3355 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3356 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3357 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3358 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003359 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003360 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3361 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3362 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3363 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3364 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3365 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3366 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3367 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3368 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003369 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303370 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003371 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303372 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003373 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3374 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3375 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303376 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003377 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3378 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303379 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003380 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3381 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303382 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003383 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3384 * another, as specified in the list of
3385 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3386 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303387 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003388 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003389 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3390 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3391 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3392 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3393 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3394 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3395 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003396 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003397 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3398 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3399 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3400 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3401 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003402 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003403 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3404 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3405 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003406 *
3407 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3408 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3409 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003410 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003411 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3412 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003413 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003414 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003415 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3416 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003417 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3418 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003419 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003420 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003421 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3422 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3423 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003424 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003425 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3426 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3427 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3428 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003429 *
3430 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3431 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3432 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003433 *
3434 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3435 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003436 *
3437 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3438 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3439 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3440 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3441 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3442 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3443 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3444 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3445 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003446 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3447 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3448 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3449 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3450 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3451 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3452 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003453 *
3454 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003455 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3456 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3457 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3458 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003459 *
3460 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3461 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003462 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3463 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3464 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3465 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3466 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3467 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003468 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3469 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3470 * this call.
3471 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3472 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3473 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003474 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003475struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003476 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3477 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3478 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003479 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003480 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003481#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3482 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3483 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003484 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003485#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003486 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003487 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003488 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003490 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003491 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003493 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003494 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3495 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3496 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3497 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003498
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003499 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3500 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3501
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003502 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003503 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003504 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3505 unsigned int changed_flags,
3506 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003507 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003508 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3509 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3510 unsigned int filter_flags,
3511 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003512 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3513 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003514 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003516 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003517 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003518 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3519 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3520 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3521 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003522 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3523 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3524 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003525 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3526 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003527 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003528 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003529 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3530 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003531 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3532 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3533 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003534 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003535 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003536 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003537 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3538 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3539 const u8 *mac_addr);
3540 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3541 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003542 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3543 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003544 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3545 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3546 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003547 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003548 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003549 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3550 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3551 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3552 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303553#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3554 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3556 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3557 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303558#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003559 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003560 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003561 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3562 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3563 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3564 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003565 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3566 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3567 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003568 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3569 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3570 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3571 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003572 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3573 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3574 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003575 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3576 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3577 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3578 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003579 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003580 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003581 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003582 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3583 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3584 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003585 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3586 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003587 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003588 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003589
3590 /**
3591 * @ampdu_action:
3592 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3593 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3594 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3595 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3596 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3597 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3598 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3599 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3600 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3601 *
3602 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3603 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3604 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3605 *
3606 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3607 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3608 *
3609 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3610 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3611 * - ``TX: 81``
3612 *
3613 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3614 *
3615 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3616 * The callback can sleep.
3617 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003618 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003619 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003620 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003621 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3622 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003623 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003624 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003625#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003626 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3627 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003628 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3629 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3630 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003631#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003632 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3633 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003634 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003635 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003636 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003637 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3638 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003639
3640 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003641 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003642 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003643 int duration,
3644 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003645 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003646 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3647 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3648 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303649 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303650 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3651 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003652 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3653 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3654 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003655
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003656 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3657 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3658 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3659 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3660 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003661 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3662 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3663 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3664 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3665 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003666
3667 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3668 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3669 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3670 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3671 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3672 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3673 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3674 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003675
3676 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3677 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003678
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003679 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3680 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3681
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003682 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3683 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3684 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3685 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3686 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3687 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3688 u32 changed);
3689 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3690 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3691 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3692 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3694 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003695 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3696 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3697 int n_vifs,
3698 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003699
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003700 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3701 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003702
3703#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3704 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3705 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3706 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3707#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003708 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3709 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3710 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003711 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3712 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3713 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003714
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003715 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3716 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3717
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003718 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3719 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003720 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3721 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003722 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3723 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003724
3725 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3726 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3727 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3728 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003729 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003730 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3732 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003733 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3734 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3735 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003736
3737 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3738 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003739 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003740
3741 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3742 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3743 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3744 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3745 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003746 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3747 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3748 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003749 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3750 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3751 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3752 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3753 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3754 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003755};
3756
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003757/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003758 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3759 *
3760 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3761 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3762 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3763 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3764 * @priv_data_len.
3765 *
3766 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3767 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3768 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3769 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3770 *
3771 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3772 */
3773struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3774 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3775 const char *requested_name);
3776
3777/**
3778 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003779 *
3780 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3781 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3782 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3783 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3784 * @priv_data_len.
3785 *
3786 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3787 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003788 *
3789 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003790 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003791static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003792struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003793 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3794{
3795 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3796}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003797
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003798/**
3799 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3800 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003801 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3802 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3803 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003804 *
3805 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003806 *
3807 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003808 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003809int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3810
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003811/**
3812 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3813 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3814 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3815 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3816 */
3817struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3818 int throughput;
3819 int blink_time;
3820};
3821
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003822/**
3823 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3824 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3825 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3826 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3827 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3828 */
3829enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3830 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3831 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3832 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3833};
3834
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003835#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003836const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3837const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3838const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3839const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3840const char *
3841__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3842 unsigned int flags,
3843 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3844 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003845#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003846/**
3847 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3848 *
3849 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3850 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3851 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3852 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3853 *
3854 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003855 *
3856 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003857 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003858static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003859{
3860#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3861 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3862#else
3863 return NULL;
3864#endif
3865}
3866
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003867/**
3868 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3869 *
3870 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3871 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3872 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3873 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3874 *
3875 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003876 *
3877 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003878 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003879static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003880{
3881#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3882 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3883#else
3884 return NULL;
3885#endif
3886}
3887
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003888/**
3889 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3890 *
3891 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3892 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3893 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3894 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3895 *
3896 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003897 *
3898 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003899 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003900static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003901{
3902#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3903 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3904#else
3905 return NULL;
3906#endif
3907}
3908
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003909/**
3910 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3911 *
3912 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3913 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3914 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3915 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3916 *
3917 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003918 *
3919 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003920 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003921static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003922{
3923#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3924 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3925#else
3926 return NULL;
3927#endif
3928}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003929
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003930/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003931 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3932 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003933 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003934 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3935 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3936 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003937 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3938 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3939 *
3940 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003941 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003942static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003943ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003944 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3945 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3946{
3947#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003948 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003949 blink_table_len);
3950#else
3951 return NULL;
3952#endif
3953}
3954
3955/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003956 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3957 *
3958 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3959 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3960 *
3961 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3962 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003963void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3964
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003965/**
3966 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3967 *
3968 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3969 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003970 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003971 *
3972 * @hw: the hardware to free
3973 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003974void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3975
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003976/**
3977 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3978 *
3979 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3980 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3981 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3982 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3983 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3984 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3985 *
3986 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3987 */
3988void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3989
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003990/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003991 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003992 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003993 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3994 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3995 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3996 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3997 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3998 *
3999 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4000 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4001 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4002 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4003 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4004 *
4005 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4006 *
4007 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004008 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004009 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4010 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004011 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004012void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4013 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004014
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004015/**
4016 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4017 *
4018 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08004019 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4020 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4021 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4022 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004023 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004024 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004025 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4026 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004027 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4028 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004029 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004030 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004031 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004032 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4033 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004034 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004035static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4036{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004037 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004038}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004039
4040/**
4041 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4042 *
4043 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004044 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4045 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004046 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004047 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4048 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004049 *
4050 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4051 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004052 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004053void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004054
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004055/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004056 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4057 *
4058 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4059 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4060 *
4061 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004062 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4063 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004064 *
4065 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4066 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4067 */
4068static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4069 struct sk_buff *skb)
4070{
4071 local_bh_disable();
4072 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4073 local_bh_enable();
4074}
4075
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004076/**
4077 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4078 *
4079 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4080 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4081 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4082 *
4083 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4084 *
4085 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4086 * each other.
4087 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004088 * @sta: currently connected sta
4089 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004090 *
4091 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004092 */
4093int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4094
4095/**
4096 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4097 * (in process context)
4098 *
4099 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4100 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4101 * applies.
4102 *
4103 * @sta: currently connected sta
4104 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004105 *
4106 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004107 */
4108static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4109 bool start)
4110{
4111 int ret;
4112
4113 local_bh_disable();
4114 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4115 local_bh_enable();
4116
4117 return ret;
4118}
4119
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004120/**
4121 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4122 * @sta: currently connected station
4123 *
4124 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4125 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4126 * connected station was received.
4127 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4128 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4129 * be serialized.
4130 */
4131void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4132
4133/**
4134 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4135 * @sta: currently connected station
4136 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4137 *
4138 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4139 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4140 * from a connected station was received.
4141 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4142 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4143 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004144 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4145 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4146 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4147 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004148 */
4149void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4150
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004151/*
4152 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4153 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4154 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004155#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004156
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004157/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004158 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004159 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004160 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4161 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004162 *
4163 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004164 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4165 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004166 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004167 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4168 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4169 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4170 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4171 *
4172 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4173 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4174 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4175 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4176 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4177 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4178 *
4179 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4180 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4181 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4182 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4183 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004184 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004185void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4186 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004187
4188/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004189 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4190 *
4191 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4192 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4193 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4194 *
4195 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4196 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4197 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4198 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4199 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4200 */
4201void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4202 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4203 struct sk_buff *skb,
4204 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4205 int max_rates);
4206
4207/**
Toke Høiland-Jørgensen484a54c2017-04-06 11:38:26 +02004208 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4209 *
4210 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4211 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4212 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4213 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4214 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4215 * slow stations to starve).
4216 *
4217 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4218 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4219 */
4220void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4221 u32 thr);
4222
4223/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004224 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4225 *
4226 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4227 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4228 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4229 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004230 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4231 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004232 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004233 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4234 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004235 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004236 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4237 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004238 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004239void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004240 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004241
4242/**
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004243 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4244 *
4245 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4246 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4247 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4248 *
4249 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4250 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4251 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4252 *
4253 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4254 * @status: tx status information
4255 */
4256void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4257 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4258
4259/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004260 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4261 *
4262 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4263 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4264 * specific skbs.
4265 *
4266 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4267 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4268 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4269 *
4270 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4271 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4272 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4273 * @info: tx status information
4274 */
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004275static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4276 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4277 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4278{
4279 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4280 .sta = sta,
4281 .info = info,
4282 };
4283
4284 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4285}
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004286
4287/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004288 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4289 *
4290 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4291 *
4292 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4293 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4294 * for a single hardware.
4295 *
4296 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4297 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4298 */
4299static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4300 struct sk_buff *skb)
4301{
4302 local_bh_disable();
4303 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4304 local_bh_enable();
4305}
4306
4307/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004308 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004309 *
4310 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4311 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4312 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004313 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4314 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004315 *
4316 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4317 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004318 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004319void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004320 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004321
4322/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004323 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4324 *
4325 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4326 * connected STA.
4327 *
4328 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4329 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4330 */
4331void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4332
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004333#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4334
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004335/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004336 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4337 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4338 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004339 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4340 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4341 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004342 */
4343struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4344 u16 tim_offset;
4345 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004346
4347 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004348};
4349
4350/**
4351 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4352 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4353 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4354 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4355 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4356 *
4357 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4358 * obtain the beacon template.
4359 *
4360 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4361 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004362 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4363 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004364 *
4365 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4366 *
4367 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4368 */
4369struct sk_buff *
4370ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4371 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4372 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4373
4374/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004375 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4376 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004377 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004378 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4379 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4380 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4381 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4382 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4383 *
4384 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004385 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004386 *
4387 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4388 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004389 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4390 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004391 *
4392 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004393 *
4394 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004395 */
4396struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4397 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4398 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4399
4400/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004401 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4402 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004403 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004404 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004405 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004406 *
4407 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004408 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004409static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4411{
4412 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4413}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004414
4415/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004416 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4417 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4418 *
4419 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4420 * This function is called implicitly when
4421 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4422 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4423 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4424 *
4425 * Return: new csa counter value
4426 */
4427u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4428
4429/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004430 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4431 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4432 *
4433 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004434 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004435 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4436 */
4437void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4438
4439/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004440 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004441 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4442 *
4443 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4444 */
4445bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4446
4447
4448/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004449 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4450 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4451 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4452 *
4453 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4454 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4455 *
4456 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004457 *
4458 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004459 */
4460struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4461 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4462
4463/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004464 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4465 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4466 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4467 *
4468 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4469 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4470 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4471 *
4472 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4473 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004474 *
4475 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004476 */
4477struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4479
4480/**
4481 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4482 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4483 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4484 *
4485 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4486 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4487 * BSSID and address is used.
4488 *
4489 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4490 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004491 *
4492 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004493 */
4494struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4495 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4496
4497/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004498 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4499 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004500 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004501 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4502 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004503 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004504 *
4505 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4506 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004507 *
4508 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004509 */
4510struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004511 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004512 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004513 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004514
4515/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004516 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4517 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004518 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004519 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4520 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004521 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004522 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4523 *
4524 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4525 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4526 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4527 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4528 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004529void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004530 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004531 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004532 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4533
4534/**
4535 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4536 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004537 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004538 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004539 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004540 *
4541 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4542 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4543 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004544 *
4545 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004546 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004547__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4548 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004549 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004550
4551/**
4552 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4553 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004554 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004555 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4556 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004557 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004558 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4559 *
4560 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4561 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4562 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4563 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4564 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004565void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4566 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004567 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004568 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004569 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4570
4571/**
4572 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4573 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004574 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004575 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004576 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004577 *
4578 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4579 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4580 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004581 *
4582 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004583 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004584__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4585 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004586 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004587 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004588
4589/**
4590 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4591 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004592 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004593 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004594 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004595 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004596 *
4597 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4598 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004599 *
4600 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004601 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004602__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4603 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004604 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004605 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004606 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004607
4608/**
4609 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4610 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004611 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004612 *
4613 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4614 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4615 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4616 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004617 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4618 *
4619 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4620 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004621 *
4622 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4623 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4624 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4625 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4626 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4627 * use common code for all beacons.
4628 */
4629struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004630ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004631
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004632/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004633 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4634 *
4635 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4636 *
4637 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4638 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4639 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4640 */
4641void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4642 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4643
4644/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004645 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004646 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004647 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4648 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004649 *
4650 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004651 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4652 * with this P1K
4653 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004654 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004655static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4656 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4657{
4658 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4659 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4660 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4661
4662 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4663}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004664
4665/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004666 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4667 *
4668 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4669 * and transmitter address.
4670 *
4671 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4672 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4673 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4674 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4675 */
4676void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4677 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4678
4679/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004680 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4681 *
4682 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4683 * in the packet.
4684 *
4685 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4686 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4687 * encrypted with this key
4688 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4689 */
4690void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4691 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004692
4693/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004694 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4695 *
4696 * @pos: start of crypto header
4697 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4698 * @pn: PN to add
4699 *
4700 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4701 * the packet payload)
4702 *
4703 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4704 * point to the crypto header)
4705 */
4706u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4707
4708/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004709 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4710 *
4711 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004712 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004713 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4714 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4715 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4716 *
4717 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4718 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4719 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4720 *
4721 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4722 * can be done concurrently.
4723 */
4724void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4725 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4726
4727/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004728 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4729 *
4730 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004731 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004732 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4733 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4734 * @seq: new sequence data
4735 *
4736 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4737 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4738 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4739 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4740 *
4741 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4742 * can be done concurrently.
4743 */
4744void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4745 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4746
4747/**
4748 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4749 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4750 *
4751 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4752 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4753 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4754 *
4755 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4756 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4757 */
4758void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4759
4760/**
4761 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4762 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4763 * @keyconf: new key data
4764 *
4765 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4766 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4767 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4768 *
4769 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4770 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4771 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4772 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4773 *
4774 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4775 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4776 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4777 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4778 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4779 * of the reconfiguration.
4780 *
4781 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4782 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4783 *
4784 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4785 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4786 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4787 * the key that's being replaced.
4788 */
4789struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4790ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4791 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4792
4793/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004794 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4795 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4796 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4797 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4798 * @gfp: allocation flags
4799 */
4800void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4801 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4802
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004803/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004804 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4805 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4806 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4807 *
4808 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4809 */
4810void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4811
4812/**
4813 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4814 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4815 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4816 *
4817 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4818 */
4819void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4820
4821/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004822 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4823 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4824 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4825 *
4826 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004827 *
4828 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004829 */
4830
4831int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4832
4833/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004834 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4835 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4836 *
4837 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4838 */
4839void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4840
4841/**
4842 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4843 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4844 *
4845 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4846 */
4847void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4848
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004849/**
4850 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4851 *
4852 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4853 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004854 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4855 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004856 *
4857 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004858 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004859 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004860void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4861 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004862
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004863/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004864 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4865 *
4866 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4867 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4868 *
4869 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4870 */
4871void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4872
4873/**
4874 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4875 *
4876 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4877 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4878 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4879 * while associating, for instance.
4880 *
4881 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4882 */
4883void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4884
4885/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004886 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4887 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4888 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4889 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4890 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4891 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4892 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4893 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004894 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004895 */
4896enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4897 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4898 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004899 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004900};
4901
4902/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004903 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4904 *
4905 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4906 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4907 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4908 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4909 *
4910 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4911 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4912 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4913 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4914 */
4915void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4916 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4917 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4918 void *data);
4919
4920/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004921 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004922 *
4923 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4924 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004925 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4926 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4927 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004928 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004929 *
4930 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004931 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004932 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004933 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4934 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004935static inline void
4936ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4937 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4938 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4939 void *data)
4940{
4941 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4942 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4943 iterator, data);
4944}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004945
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004946/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004947 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4948 *
4949 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4950 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4951 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4952 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004953 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004954 *
4955 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004956 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004957 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4958 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4959 */
4960void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004961 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004962 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4963 u8 *mac,
4964 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4965 void *data);
4966
4967/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004968 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4969 *
4970 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4971 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4972 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4973 *
4974 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4975 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4976 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4977 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4978 */
4979void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4980 u32 iter_flags,
4981 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4982 u8 *mac,
4983 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4984 void *data);
4985
4986/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004987 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4988 *
4989 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4990 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4991 * function for them.
4992 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4993 *
4994 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4995 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4996 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4997 */
4998void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4999 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5000 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5001 void *data);
5002/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04005003 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5004 *
5005 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5006 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5007 *
5008 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5009 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5010 */
5011void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5012
5013/**
5014 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5015 *
5016 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5017 * workqueue.
5018 *
5019 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5020 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5021 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5022 */
5023void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5024 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5025 unsigned long delay);
5026
5027/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005028 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005029 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005030 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305031 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005032 *
5033 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005034 *
5035 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5036 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5037 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5038 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305039int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5040 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005041
5042/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005043 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005044 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005045 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5046 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5047 *
5048 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005049 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5050 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005051 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005052void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005053 u16 tid);
5054
5055/**
5056 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005057 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005058 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005059 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005060 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005061 *
5062 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5063 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5064 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5065 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005066int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005067
5068/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005069 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005070 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005071 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5072 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5073 *
5074 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005075 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5076 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005077 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005078void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005079 u16 tid);
5080
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005081/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005082 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5083 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005084 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005085 * @addr: station's address
5086 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005087 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5088 *
5089 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005090 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5091 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005092struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005093 const u8 *addr);
5094
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005095/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005096 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005097 *
5098 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005099 * @addr: remote station's address
5100 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005101 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005102 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5103 *
5104 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005105 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5106 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005107 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5108 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5109 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5110 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5111 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5112 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5113 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005114 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005115 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005116 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005117struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5118 const u8 *addr,
5119 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005120
5121/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005122 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5123 * @hw: the hardware
5124 * @pubsta: the station
5125 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5126 *
5127 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5128 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5129 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5130 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5131 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5132 *
5133 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5134 * manner.
5135 *
5136 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5137 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5138 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5139 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5140 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5141 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5142 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5143 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5144 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5145 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5146 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5147 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5148 * woke up while blocked or not.
5149 */
5150void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5151 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5152
5153/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005154 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5155 * @pubsta: the station
5156 *
5157 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5158 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5159 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5160 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5161 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005162 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5163 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5164 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5165 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5166 *
5167 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5168 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5169 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5170 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005171 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005172void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005173
5174/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005175 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5176 * @pubsta: the station
5177 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5178 *
5179 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5180 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5181 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5182 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5183 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5184 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5185 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5186 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5187 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5188 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5189 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5190 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5191 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5192 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5193 */
5194void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5195
5196/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005197 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5198 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5199 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5200 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5201 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5202 *
5203 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5204 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5205 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5206 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5207 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5208 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005209 *
5210 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5211 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5212 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005213 */
5214void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5215 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5216 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5217 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5218 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5219 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5220 void *data),
5221 void *iter_data);
5222
5223/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005224 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5225 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5226 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5227 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5228 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5229 *
5230 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5231 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5232 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5233 * in removal process will be skipped.
5234 *
5235 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5236 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5237 */
5238void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5239 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5240 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5241 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5242 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5243 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5244 void *data),
5245 void *iter_data);
5246
5247/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005248 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5249 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5250 * @iter: iterator function
5251 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5252 *
5253 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5254 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5255 * places while calling into the driver.
5256 *
5257 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5258 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5259 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005260 *
5261 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5262 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5263 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5264 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005265 */
5266void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5267 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5268 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5270 void *data),
5271 void *iter_data);
5272
5273/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005274 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5275 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5276 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5277 *
5278 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5279 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5280 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5281 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5282 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005283 * %NULL.
5284 *
5285 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005286 */
5287struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5288 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5289
5290/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005291 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5292 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005293 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005294 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005295 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005296 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005297 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5298 */
5299void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005300
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005301/**
5302 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5303 *
5304 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5305 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005306 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005307 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5308 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005309 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5310 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005311 *
5312 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5313 * without connection recovery attempts.
5314 */
5315void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5316
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005317/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005318 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5319 *
5320 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5321 *
5322 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5323 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5324 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5325 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5326 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5327 *
5328 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5329 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5330 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5331 * disconnect normally later.
5332 *
5333 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5334 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5335 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5336 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5337 */
5338void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5339
5340/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005341 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5342 * rssi threshold triggered
5343 *
5344 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5345 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005346 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005347 * @gfp: context flags
5348 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005349 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005350 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5351 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5352 */
5353void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5354 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005355 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005356 gfp_t gfp);
5357
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005358/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005359 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5360 *
5361 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5362 * @gfp: context flags
5363 */
5364void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5365
5366/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005367 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5368 *
5369 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5370 */
5371void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5372
5373/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005374 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5375 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5376 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5377 *
5378 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5379 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5380 */
5381void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5382
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005383/**
5384 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5385 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005386 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005387 *
5388 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5389 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5390 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5391 */
5392void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5393 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5394
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005395/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005396 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5397 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5398 */
5399void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5400
5401/**
5402 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5403 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5404 */
5405void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5406
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005407/**
5408 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5409 *
5410 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5411 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5412 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5413 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5414 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5415 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5416 *
5417 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5418 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5419 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5420 */
5421void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5422 const u8 *addr);
5423
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005424/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005425 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5426 * @pubsta: station struct
5427 * @tid: the session's TID
5428 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5429 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5430 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5431 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5432 *
5433 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5434 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5435 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5436 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5437 */
5438void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5439 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5440 u16 received_mpdus);
5441
5442/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005443 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5444 *
5445 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5446 * buffer.
5447 *
5448 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5449 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5450 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5451 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5452 */
5453void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5454
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005455void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5456 unsigned int bit);
5457
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005458/**
5459 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5460 *
5461 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5462 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5463 * reordering.
5464 *
5465 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5466 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5467 *
5468 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5469 * @addr: station mac address
5470 * @tid: the rx tid
5471 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005472static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5473 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5474{
5475 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5476 return;
5477 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5478}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005479
5480/**
5481 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5482 *
5483 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5484 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5485 * reordering.
5486 *
5487 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5488 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5489 *
5490 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5491 * @addr: station mac address
5492 * @tid: the rx tid
5493 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005494static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5495 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5496{
5497 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5498 return;
5499 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5500}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005501
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005502/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005503
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005504/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005505 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005506 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005507 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5508 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5509 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005510 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5511 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005512 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5513 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5514 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5515 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5516 * RTS threshold
5517 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5518 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005519 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005520 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005521 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005522 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005523struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5524 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5525 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5526 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5527 struct sk_buff *skb;
5528 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5529 bool rts, short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005530 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005531 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005532 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005533};
5534
5535struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005536 const char *name;
5537 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005538 void (*free)(void *priv);
5539
5540 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5541 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005542 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005543 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305544 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005545 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005546 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5547 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005548 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5549 void *priv_sta);
5550
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02005551 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5552 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5553 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005554 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5555 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5556 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005557 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5558 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005559
5560 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5561 struct dentry *dir);
5562 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005563
5564 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005565};
5566
5567static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005568 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005569 int index)
5570{
5571 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5572}
5573
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005574/**
5575 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5576 *
5577 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5578 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5579 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5580 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5581 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5582 * not null.
5583 *
5584 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5585 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5586 *
5587 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5588 * that this may be null.
5589 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5590 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5591 */
5592bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5593 void *priv_sta,
5594 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5595
5596
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005597static inline s8
5598rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5599 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5600{
5601 int i;
5602
5603 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5604 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5605 return i;
5606
5607 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005608 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005609
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005610 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005611 return 0;
5612}
5613
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005614static inline
5615bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5616 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5617{
5618 unsigned int i;
5619
5620 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5621 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5622 return true;
5623 return false;
5624}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005625
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005626/**
5627 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5628 *
5629 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5630 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5631 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5632 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5633 *
5634 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5635 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5636 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5637 */
5638int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5639 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5640 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5641
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005642int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5643void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005644
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005645static inline bool
5646conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5647{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005648 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005649}
5650
5651static inline bool
5652conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5653{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005654 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5655 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005656}
5657
5658static inline bool
5659conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5660{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005661 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5662 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005663}
5664
5665static inline bool
5666conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5667{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005668 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005669}
5670
5671static inline bool
5672conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5673{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005674 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5675 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5676 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005677}
5678
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005679static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5680ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5681{
5682 if (p2p) {
5683 switch (type) {
5684 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5685 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5686 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5687 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5688 default:
5689 break;
5690 }
5691 }
5692 return type;
5693}
5694
5695static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5696ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5697{
5698 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5699}
5700
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005701/**
5702 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5703 *
5704 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5705 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5706 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5707 *
5708 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5709 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5710 * matching GroupId management frame.
5711 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5712 */
5713void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5714 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5715
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005716void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5717 int rssi_min_thold,
5718 int rssi_max_thold);
5719
5720void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005721
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005722/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005723 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005724 *
5725 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5726 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005727 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5728 *
5729 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5730 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005731 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005732int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5733
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005734/**
5735 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5736 * @vif: virtual interface
5737 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5738 * @gfp: allocation flags
5739 *
5740 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5741 */
5742void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5743 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5744 gfp_t gfp);
5745
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005746/**
5747 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5748 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5749 * @vif: virtual interface
5750 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5751 * @band: the band to transmit on
5752 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5753 *
5754 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5755 */
5756bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5757 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5758 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5759
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005760/**
5761 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5762 *
5763 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5764 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5765 *
5766 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5767 *
5768 * private:
5769 *
5770 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5771 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5772 */
5773struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5774 u32 next_tsf;
5775 bool has_next_tsf;
5776
5777 u8 absent;
5778
5779 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5780 struct {
5781 u32 start;
5782 u32 duration;
5783 u32 interval;
5784 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5785};
5786
5787/**
5788 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5789 *
5790 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5791 * @data: NoA tracking data
5792 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5793 *
5794 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5795 */
5796int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5797 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5798
5799/**
5800 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5801 *
5802 * @data: NoA tracking data
5803 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5804 */
5805void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5806
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005807/**
5808 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5809 * @vif: virtual interface
5810 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5811 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5812 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5813 * @gfp: allocation flags
5814 *
5815 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5816 */
5817void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5818 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5819 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005820
5821/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005822 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5823 *
5824 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5825 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5826 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5827 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5828 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5829 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5830 *
5831 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5832 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5833 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5834 *
5835 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5836 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5837 *
5838 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5839 */
5840int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5841
5842/**
5843 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5844 *
5845 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5846 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5847 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5848 *
5849 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5850 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5851 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5852 *
5853 * @sta: the station
5854 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5855 */
5856void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5857
5858/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005859 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5860 *
5861 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5862 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5863 *
5864 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5865 */
5866struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5867 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005868
5869/**
5870 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5871 *
5872 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5873 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5874 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5875 *
5876 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5877 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5878 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5879 */
5880void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5881 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5882 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03005883
5884/**
5885 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5886 *
5887 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5888 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5889 *
5890 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5891 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5892 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5893 * @gfp: allocation flags
5894 */
5895void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5896 u8 inst_id,
5897 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5898 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03005899
5900/**
5901 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5902 *
5903 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5904 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5905 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5906 *
5907 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5908 * @match: match event information
5909 * @gfp: allocation flags
5910 */
5911void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5912 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5913 gfp_t gfp);
5914
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005915#endif /* MAC80211_H */